Fiat - 500c - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014 (2)

2014 FIAT 500 2014 OWNER’S MANUAL FCA US LLC 14FF500-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 1 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers: Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc- • The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are maintaining its validity traditional to our vehicles. • The range of additional services available to FCA US This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisLLC customers tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencIt is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- When it comes to service, remember that your authorized tions and recommendations in this manual will help dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techniassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction. INTRODUCTION 5 Consult the following table for a description of the Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual: contains the information you desire. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. 1 6 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 1 This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title. Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .19 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .36 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .37 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .44 ▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .48 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the authotransmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can key simply press the mechanical key release button. be used to order duplicate keys. A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal 1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an automatic transmission). 2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder. Mechanical Key Release Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING! Ignition Switch Positions 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) 3 — AVV (START) • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK, sounds a signal to remove the key. SENTRY KEY® CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also Replacement Keys considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. problem with the electronics. At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided CAUTION! • Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE General Information REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 EQUIPPED and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) subject to the following conditions: using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit• This device may not cause harmful interference. ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at • This device must accept any interference that may be the vehicle to activate the system. received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Release Button current setting, refer to “Personal Settings (CustomerNOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Inwith metal objects. strument Panel” for further information. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Opening Power Top Remote Function Opening Power Top Remote Function: The remote keyless power top function can only be used 1. OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on with the engine off. the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening whenever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or when it reaches the spoiler position NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open with the remote, please refer to the ⬙Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional information. WARNING! Key Fob NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be used to open the power top to the spoiler position. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you: (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 WARNING! (Continued) • Before operating the power top, make sure that no moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal. • Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top. • When using the power top button on RKE transmitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation. • Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment. • Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion. To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming”. If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details. Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. 1. Press the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw located on the side of the Key Fob. 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Mechanical Key Release Button Key Fob Screw Location 2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob 3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the using a small screwdriver. battery observing its polarity. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Battery Case Removed NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal screw to lock it into place. distance, check for these two conditions: 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years. 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. DOOR LOCKS The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. Driver’s Door Lock Handle WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Power Door Locks — If Equipped A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE a red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the driver’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition. Driver’s Power Door Lock Handle Autoclose When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To change the setting proceed as follows: POWER WINDOWS 1. Briefly press the MENU button to enter the MENU Power Window Switches screen. There are single window controls located on the shifter or DOWN button to highlight bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the 2. Press the UP “Autoclose”. Press the MENU button, use the UP driver and passenger door windows. The window conor DOWN buttons to turn setting ON or OFF trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxiWARNING! mately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor- not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a dance with local laws. location accessible to children. Occupants, particuRefer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” larly unattended children, can become entrapped by in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your the windows while operating the power window owner manual on your DVD for further information. switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE second, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch. Wind Buffeting Power Window Switches Auto-Down The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch for approximately one Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 LIFTGATE To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the driver door handle. 2 To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. Liftgate Handle WARNING! • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep (Continued) 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants NOTE: Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when energy during an impact event opening the liftgate in cold weather. • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the Some of the most important safety features in your seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt vehicle are the restraint systems: all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating item in a seat — if equipped positions OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. WARNING! • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward facing infant seat. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for Children (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to “LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children).” Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltrisk of harm from a deploying air bag: positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should buckled up in a rear seat. ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. 4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in ⬙If You Need Consumer Assistance.⬙ WARNING! • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Side air bags also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING! (Continued) • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen normal conditions. However in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the far away from home or on your own street. vehicle or being thrown out. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some WARNING! of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in (Continued) 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best. • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. (Continued) Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap. plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 2 Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. (Continued) 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. Positioning Lap Belt 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the shoulder belt. webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 If the passenger seating position is equipped with an The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ALR and is being used for normal usage: equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably which are used to secure a child restraint system. For wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull feature for each seating position. out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the Driver Passenger latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ First Row N/A ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Second Row ALR ALR Equipped Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions • N/A — Not Applicable • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Energy Management Feature now in the Automatic Locking Mode. This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it collision. to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This locking mode. feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System The seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlert®) equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. front passenger (if equipped with front passenger These devices may improve the performance of the seat BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are pants, including those in child restraints. fastened. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt worn snugly and positioned properly. Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenduration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belt Extender (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and notification. when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the extender should be used only if the existing belt is not front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if long enough. When it is not required, remove the exequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in tender and store it. the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. WARNING! BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert®. NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat the best way to keep the baby safe. belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take words AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental the force if there is a collision. Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags. The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the air bags to have different inflation levels based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Knee Bolster 3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Light are located between the side windows. The trim covering • Steering Wheel and Column the SABIC is labeled AIRBAG. • Instrument Panel This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SAB are marked with • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front • Knee Impact Bolsters seats. • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag NOTE: • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • authorized dealer immediately. • Air Bag System Components • Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components: • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Advanced Front Air Bag Features WARNING! (Continued) The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors. WARNING! • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. (Continued) The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The SAB are marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers, placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant, that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Label When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only. 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant protection. SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Occupants, including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the NOTE: Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions. • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. • Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window. (Continued) Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact. Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags. Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protecprotection for the driver and front passenger. tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls collisions depending on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side required for this vehicle. collisions. The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions, Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic including some that may produce substantial vehicle ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemendamage — for example, some pole collisions, truck tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Side Air Bag underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), Supplemental Seat-Mounted hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt pretensioners, as Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with required, depending on several factors, including the little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe severity and type of impact. initial deceleration. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. type of collision. Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily away from an inflating air bag. or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup. the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruON/RUN or START position. If the key is in the OFF/ ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is LOCK position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosis not on and the air bags will not inflate. tics also record the nature of the malfunction. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates are possible, based on several factors, including the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds. at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a designed to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side (SABIC), depending on the severity and type of collision. air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on collision. the impact side of the vehicle. Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain air bag is about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated. event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: • Cut off fuel to the engine. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, until the ignition key is turned off. vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as whether or not an air bag should have deployed. the battery has power or until the ignition key is Front And Side Impact Sensors removed. In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the • Unlock the doors automatically. ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events. After the event occurs, when the system is active, the message ⬙Fuel Cutoff See Handbook⬙ is displayed. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine the communication network remains intact, and the compartment and on the ground near the engine compower remains intact, depending on the nature of the partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 System Reset Procedure After an impact causing air bag deployment, the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned off. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure. Customer Action 1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2 Customer Will See Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Customer Action 8. Turn ignition OFF. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). Customer Will See System is now reset and the engine may be started. If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The reset procedure must be performed again in order to be abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those successful. you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium If A Deployment Occurs floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. immediately after deployment. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all immediately. collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or Maintaining Your Air Bag System throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on WARNING! your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• Modifications to any part of the air bag system structions for cleaning. could cause it to fail when you need it. You could Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have debe injured if the air bag system is not there to ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air protect you. Do not modify the components or bags will not be in place to protect you. wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the WARNING! upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot add aftermarket side steps or running boards. protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retracbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imworks on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag troller (ORC) system serviced as well. system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may (Continued) 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the Body Control Module (BCM) fuse block inside the vehicle for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. Event Data Recorder (EDR) These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Child Restraints There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety times, including babies and children. Every state in the Standards. You should also make sure that you can install United States, and every Canadian province, requires it in the vehicle where you will use it. that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 NOTE: • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: • http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/ safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING! • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward facing infant seat. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only + Top Tether Tether Anchor Only Anchor X X X X X X THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle • • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint? Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages? Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. N/A No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Locating The LATCH Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH WARNING! This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle tions to attach a tether anchor. anchorages. 3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack that seating position. For some second row seats, you in the straps according to the child restraint manufacmay need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved turer’s instructions. forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by move it to its rear-most position to make room for the pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt child seat. You may also move the front seat forward path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) to allow more room for the child seat. in any direction. 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatWhen using the LATCH attaching system to install a ing position. child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING! • Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Yes Yes No Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Yes, all may be moved Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of position. For some second row seats, you may need to the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the rear-most position to make room for the child seat. seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. You may also move the front seat forward to allow 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is more room for the child seat. locked, you should not be able to pull out any web2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. to pass it through the seat belt path of the child 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt lap portion around the child restraint while you push path. the child restraint rearward and downward into the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a vehicle seat. “click”. 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat. 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path. path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the “click”. seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching lap portion around the child restraint while you push Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate anchor. into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by restraint installation tight, try a different seating position. pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have tether anchorage for that seating position, move the trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconchild restraint to another position in the vehicle if one nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short is available. buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraint. restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 route the tether strap under the head restraint and 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint manufacturer’s instructions. restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. WARNING! 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriAn unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly mental and should be avoided. injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your VeA long break-in period is not required for the engine and hicle”. drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Transporting Pets Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued) • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Defroster cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to system. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a able. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Door Latches Tires Fluid Leaks Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. 2 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED . .88 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .95 ▫ Lowering The Power Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 ▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 ▫ Raising The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 䡵 BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 ▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure . . . . .90 ▫ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 ▫ Wind Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ The Hands-Free Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . .104 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .92 ▫ Recline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 ▫ Folding Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ EZ Entry Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .117 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .110 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .117 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . .118 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . .121 ▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .114 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 ▫ Emergency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .126 ▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .135 ▫ Rear Park Assist Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .137 ▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . .129 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .130 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .132 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 ▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 ▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 3 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the • The power top buttons will operate when the ignition power convertible top switch is located on the overhead switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position. console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger side button, is used to open the power top, and the driver • The power top can be remotely operated with the key fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function” side button, is used to close the power top. in “Things To Know Before Starting” for more information. Lowering The Power Top Auto Open Push the top open button approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top. Power Convertible Top Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Manual Open Manual Close For manual open, push and hold the open button until For manual close, push and hold the close button until desired position until one-quarter open position. Push desired roof position or until spoiler position. and hold again for full close position. NOTE: Vertical movement only operates in auto open/ NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 close mode. cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present. Raising The Power Top Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “MaintainAuto Close ing Your Vehicle” for information. From the convertible top fully open position, push the top close button for approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close button for approximately one second a second time for the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close button to fully close convertible top. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: • Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips. (Continued) 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior. • Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision. WARNING! The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all (Continued) Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure If your power convertible top does not operate in the Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/ closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open the following relearn procedure may be necessary. 1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed. 2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using manual mode). 3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an addi- NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity. tional three seconds. If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the procedure a second time. 5. Release the OPEN button. 6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully Wind Stop closed position. The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle. 7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operabegins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED tion. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up. button. MIRRORS At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open Inside Day/Night Mirror position. The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success- various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. ful. Auto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top by moving the small control under the mirror to the night Function will be functional. 3 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare the windshield). from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. Adjusting Rearview Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door trim panel. 3 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Power Mirror Switches The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mirror, press the mirror select switch to either the L (left) Spotter Mirror — If Equipped or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust. Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle. move. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Spotter Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Folding Mirrors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward. 3 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Sun Visors The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown) 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE hands from the steering wheel. To use voice commands you are not required to train the voice recognition system to recognize your voice. This implies that the system is Overview nearly equally performing with different persons, i.e.: the Windows Mobile™-based FIAT BLUE&ME™ is a per- voice recognition system is of the “speaker independent” sonal telematic system enabling you to use communica- type. tion and entertainment applications expressly designed With this system you can also play your favorite music for use in the car. stored on USB device and select tracks and playback The BLUE&ME™ system installed on your car is modes with both voice commands or buttons on the equipped with a hands-free kit, message reader and steering wheel. media player, and it is preset for future installation of This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules additional services. subject to the following two conditions: The BLUE&ME™ system, fully integrated with voice • This device may not cause harmful interference. commands, buttons on the steering wheel and multifunction display messages, gives you the possibility of inter- • This device must accept all interference received, acting with your Bluetooth® wireless technology mobile including interference that may cause undesired phone (even if you keep it in your pocket or bag) without operation. having to take your eyes off the road or remove your BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION — IF EQUIPPED UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 your mobile phone manually and visually using the steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multiThe basic characteristic of this hands-free kit is voice function display. recognition with Bluetooth® wireless technology. With this system you can make and receive calls safely and securely by using either voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel. This can be done under any driving condition without ever having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel, as required by current laws. The Hands-Free Kit Bluetooth® wireless technology enables wireless connection between your mobile phone and the hands-free kit installed on your car. To use the hands-free kit, you need a Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone. This hands-free kit gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your 1 — Mute/ESC mobile phone while driving, even if your mobile device 2 — Phone/Main does not feature this capability. You can also interact with 3 — Phone Hang Up 4 — Voice Recognition (VR) 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To get started with BLUE&ME™ hands-free kit with • To interact with BLUE&ME™ you can use either the voice recognition, you have to simply pair your buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. With voice recognition, you can perform system funcBluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone tions by speaking voice commands, also identified as with the system. “keywords”. When the system recognizes a keyword, Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once. it will respond with the appropriate action. Voice NOTE: recognition is an easy and convenient way to use BLUE&ME™. • During the mobile phone pairing procedure, BLUE&ME™ attempts to detect a phone equipped All the system functions are available within the with Bluetooth® wireless technology within range and BLUE&ME™ Main Menu. When the car is not moving, then establishes the connection using a Personal Iden- you can scroll through the complete menu by using either the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands. tification Number (PIN). When you are travelling, you can interact with • Once your phone is paired, you have the option to BLUE&ME™ by using the buttons on the steering wheel transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands-free or voice commands relevant only to phone functions kit, to make a phone call either by using the contacts (LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK) and the media player. list or directly pronouncing the phone number, to To activate settings when travelling you can only use answer a call and also to answer another incoming voice commands. phone call. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 • Conference Call — You can call another contact while you are engaged in a phone conversation (with Contact Calling By Voice — You can call a contact in Bluetooth® phones supporting this option). your mobile phone phonebook using your voice. You can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning • Call Waiting — While engaged in a phone conversathrough the entries on the multifunction display. (To tion, you can receive notification of another incoming use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone phone call, answer the other incoming phone call, and contacts to the hands-free kit phonebook). switch between two ongoing phone conversations. (Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compatDigit Dialing By Voice — You can dial a phone ible mobile phones). number by pushing the VR button on the steering wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed. • Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call — You can refuse an incoming call or end a current call by To Call The SMS Text Sender — Call directly the last pushing the Phone Hang-up button on the steering SMS text sender or the sender of a message received wheel. and stored in the BLUE&ME™ inbox. After pairing and connecting your phone with the To Answer A Call — You can answer an incoming call BLUE&ME™ system, you can make phone calls by by pushing the MAIN/Phone button on the steering speaking keywords or pushing buttons on the steering wheel. The hands-free kit enables the following operations: • • • • 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE wheel. When using the hands-free phone, the audio NOTE: Not all mobile phones support the SMS text output of a phone conversation is heard through your car message reader function or automatic phonebook transfer via Bluetooth®. For further information on the list of sound speakers. compatible mobile phones go to http:// Message Reader www.fiatusa.com, find the SUPPORT section near the The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables automatic bottom of web page and click on the Bluetooth® logo. reading, through the car sound system, of the SMS texts Message reader functions are managed by the control you receive on your Bluetooth® wireless technology mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE&ME™ voice commands. and connected to the BLUE&ME™ system. It does not provide access to messages that were received before the The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables the following device was connected with the BLUE&ME™ system. The operations: message reader will also interpret any abbreviation and • To display an indicator on the instrument panel that emoticon contained in the SMS text. indicates you have received a new SMS text. It will display the sender’s number/name and will ask you whether to read the text of the message to you. • To manage the list of SMS texts received on your BLUE&ME™ paired mobile phone. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 • To read the messages received and stored. Messages In this way, while you are driving you can play your favorite music collections. can be read multiple times. • To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the • iPod® Player — See dedicated paragraph under Media Player Functions. steering wheel or voice commands. • To delete individual messages or the entire inbox using The media player enables the following operations: the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. • Digital Audio Playback — You can play all your digital audio files (.mp3, .wma, .wav, .aac) or play a The BLUE&ME™ system can also recognize and read customized playlist (.m3u or .wpl format). abbreviations, if any (e.g. “ILUVU” will be read like “I love you”) and interpret the most usual emoticons (e.g. :-) • Audio File Selection By Category — You can play all will be read like “Smile”), that are currently used to write audio files of a certain category, e.g.: album, artist or SMS texts. genre. Media Player • Playback Options — While playing tracks you can With the BLUE&ME™ media player you can play, the select the following options: Play, Stop, Next track, digital audio files stored on a USB device by simply Previous track, Shuffle and Loop track. connecting it to the USB port located in the glove box of the car. 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • The media player does not support audio files compressed with other formats and DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected audio files. Non-supported audio files that may be present on the USB device will be ignored. • To use the media player, you have to simply connect (directly or by an extension lead) your USB device to the car USB port. After turning the ignition key to ON, BLUE&ME™ will start building your media library. At the end of this operation you can surf the complete library and scroll its categories as required using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. BLUE&ME™ will then play your selection via the car sound system. WARNING! • Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, accident and injury. It is strongly recommended that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road or your hands off the steering wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. • Read and Follow Instructions: before using your system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this “Owner’s Manual”. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • Keep the Owner’s Manual in the car: when kept in the car, the Owner’s Manual will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the system. Please make certain that before using the (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 WARNING! (Continued) system for the first time, all persons have access to the Owner’s Manual and read its instructions and safety information carefully. SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Recline Adjustment The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the lever, lean back until the desired position has been seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the reached, and release the lever. desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure, Adjusting Bar UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Seat Height Adjustment The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height. Recline Lever WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Height Adjuster 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry its locked position once the rear passengers are seated. feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the Memory Feature release lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback, Both front seats have a memory feature, which can dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward operate in two ways: to allow access in and out of the rear seat. Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back And Track Fore/Aft Position Memory: EZ Entry Feature After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to. This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright. Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only Memory: EZ Entry Lever After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first be returned upright prior to going back to the last UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in the seat back memory being set only – The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory position. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track position as described in Memory Function Option 1. Heated Seats — If Equipped On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area. Press the switch once to turn on the heated seats. Press the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraints Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint. WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealership. 3 WARNING! Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. Push Button Rear Head Restraints The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push position, see your authorized dealership immediately. downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Vehicle” for information on tether routing. To open the hood, two latches must be released. 1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located on the left kick panel, rearward. Push Button Hood Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the hood, near the center, and raise the hood. 3 Hood Prop Rod Hood Safety Latch Location 3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position. In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod. 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm) approximately and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals. NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Headlights Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 High Beams With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever towards the instrument panel to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams. Flash-To-Pass Headlight Operation You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released. NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime Parking Lights Running Lights will be deactivated. To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and turn on the headlights. 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol. NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on with DRL. If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using the display menus. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Turn Signals Turn Signal Operation Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspond- the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to returned to a straight position. indicate the operation of the turn signal. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Lane Change Assist Deactivation Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash and hold it for more than two seconds. three times then automatically turn off. Interior Lights Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay The interior light switches are located in the overhead When this feature is selected the driver can choose to console. The interior lights can be set to three different have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time. positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position). Activation Using the switch on the left overhead, press the switch to Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK the right from its center position and the lights are always position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the on. Press the switch to the left from its center position and steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by position, and the lights are turned on and off when the 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side a maximum of 210 seconds. of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights. Press the switch to the right to turn 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE on the right light and press the switch to the left to turn • When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated. on the left light. CAUTION! Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery. Interior Light Timing (Center Position) • When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off. Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) • When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated. NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved There are four different modes of operation that can be into the ON/RUN position. activated in this position: • When one door is opened a three minute timer is activated. • When the key is removed from the ignition (within two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10 second timer is activated. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Press The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off. instrument panel, just below the radio. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Front Fog Lights — If Equipped The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column. NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Fog Light Switch 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off There are five different modes of operation for the front This is the normal position of the wiper lever. windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be Intermittent Wiper Operation raised or lowered to access these modes: Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers will operate intermittently. NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease. Low Speed Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers will operate at low speed. High Speed Windshield Wiper Operation Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers will operate at high speed. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Manual High Speed/Mist CAUTION! (Continued) Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off. Front Windshield Washer Operation Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. CAUTION! • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the (Continued) windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation. With the front windshield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. Rear Wiper Operation NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED 3 This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal controls. Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place. 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). Electronic Speed Control Buttons NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the ElecThe Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at right side of the steering wheel. the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired To Set A Desired Speed vehicle set speed. Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button To Activate and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in operate at the selected speed. the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button. turned off when not in use. To Deactivate WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory. 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) the new set speed will be established. button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). Metric Speed (km/h) To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed • Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 2 km/h. When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. continue to increase until the button is released, then The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of the new set speed will be established. U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: To Decrease Speed U.S. Speed (mph) When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed button results in an increase of 1 mph. of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 U.S. Speed (mph) To Accelerate For Passing • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. button results in a decrease of 1 mph. Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the continue to decrease until the button is released, then vehicle set speed. the new set speed will be established. NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains Metric Speed (km/h) speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h moderate hills is normal. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so button results in a decrease of 2 km/h. it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will Control. continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes more frequent. Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indica- rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the tion of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a location, type and orientation of the obstacle. parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and recommendations. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist Rear Park Assist Alerts system indicates the nearest obstacle. If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds is engaged, an audible alert is activated. to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver underside of the car during the parking maneuver. that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away. 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL Obstacle Distance MEANING An obstacle is present within the sensors’ field of view Failure Sensor or System failures INDICATION Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker) • Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases. • Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm). • Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Menu Functions” for further information). Visual Signal (instrument panel) • Icon appears on display. • Message is displayed on multifunction display (where provided). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further muted. information. The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicondition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON. turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor maneuvers parallel to walls). is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the turned off automatically. instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System display. Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash Failure Indications The warning icon is illuminated and a message soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped). washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. Park Assist System Usage Precautions not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. • Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be system operating properly. displayed in the instrument cluster. NOTE: • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist. CAUTION! • Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might • Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist. must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. WARNING! • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and (Continued) 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console. Power Sunroof Switch WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 To Open Pinch Protect Feature Press and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position. Press the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second, windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurswitch a second time and hold for approximately one rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with second to completely close the sunroof. the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. To Close 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Emergency Operation Sun Shade — If Equipped In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box. There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the desired location. For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or closed. To open the sun shade press the tab and move the shade to a full open position. Manual Sun Shade UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Power is available when the ignition switch is in the There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet, ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or located in the floor console, for added convenience. This accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and position. other low power devices. ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS CAUTION! Power Outlet • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 CAUTION! (Continued) discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off. 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo- floor between the front driver and passenger seats. cated on the floor console between the front seats. CUPHOLDERS Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the glove compartment latch to open the glove compartment. Push the glove compartment door upward to close it. 3 Glove Compartment Latch 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CARGO AREA FEATURES The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity. Push down the release button, located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its foldeddown position to provide a flat load floor cargo area. When returning the seatback to its upright position, push rearward until the seatback is properly latched. Rear Seat Release Buttons UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel, below the radio. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time. Folded Rear Seats NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .145 ▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . .164 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 ▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SPORT. . . . . . . . . .147 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .148 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ EVIC Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 ▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 䡵 SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 ▫ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 ▫ Suggestions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 4 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .206 ▫ Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 ▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 ▫ Functions And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 ▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped. . . . . .196 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 ▫ CD MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ▫ Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 䡵 iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .207 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .208 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . .209 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1— 2— 3— 4— Trip 5— 6— Side Vent Multifunction Lever – Light Control Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights Windshield Wiper, Washer, Computer Central Air Vents Storage Compartment/Radio 7 — Passenger Air Bag 8 — Glove Compartment 9 — Rear Defrost Button 10 — Hazard Button 11 — Climate Controls 12 — Power Windows Control 13 14 15 16 — — — — Storage Compartment Shift Lever Sport Button Horn/Driver Airbag 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SPORT 4 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 2. Rear Defrost Indicator 1. Glow Plug Light — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the automatically turns off after 20 minutes. ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an CAUTION! engine block heater has not been used. The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to seconds. An externally powered electric engine block the heating elements: heater is available as optional equipment or from your • Use care when washing the inside of the rear authorized dealer. window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on The message ⬙Plug In Engine Heater⬙, will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F (-15°C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start. the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 CAUTION! (Continued) • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator / Follow Me Home (Headlight Delay) Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. If the Follow Me Home feature is activated this indicator This indicator will illuminate when the front fog will illuminate and the EVIC will show how lights are on. long the function remains active. For further information, 4. Low Fuel Light refer to “Follow Me Home” in “Understanding The When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.0 Features of Your Vehicle”. gallon (3.8L) this light will turn on, and remain on 7. Turn Signal Indicator until fuel is added. The arrow will flash in unison with the exterior 5. High Beam Indicator turn signal, when using the turn signal lever. 3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer- 8. Generic Warning Light ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam. The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Oil Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 4 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Intervention, 11. Seat Belt Reminder Light Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure. When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ 9. Air Bag Warning Light RUN, this light will turn on. If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. When This light will turn on for four seconds as a driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the bulb check when the ignition switch is first Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To during starting, stays on, or turns on while Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further driving, have the system inspected at an authorized information. dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for 12. Charging System Light further information. This light shows the status of the electrical charg10. Cruise On Indicator — If Equipped ing system. The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on This light will turn on when the electronic briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on speed control is ON. For further information, while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underelectrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If standing Your Instrument Panel.” the charging system light remains on, it means that the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If rized dealer. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and 13. Power Steering System Warning your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on This light is used to manage the electrical when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Operating” for further information. 15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 14. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), This light informs you of a problem with the should be checked monthly when cold and Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a inflated to the inflation pressure recommended problem is detected, the light will come on by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light 4 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subseAccordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the syspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has to continue to function properly. not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. 17. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. 18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system, called OBDII, that This light will illuminate when there is an monitors engine and automatic transmission conautomatic transmission fault. trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF/LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. 16. Automatic Gearbox Fault 4 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 19. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. 20. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the Brake Warning Light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the brake system reservoir. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD fault, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF/LOCK position If brake fault is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. 4 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The light also will turn on when the parking brake is Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on conapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has tion. been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is problem diagnosed and corrected. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 21. Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF) Indica- NOTE: tor Light This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the driver. 22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation / Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on for four seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC • The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. 23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it 25. Vehicle Security Light indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system If during starting, the key code is not correctly is not functioning and that service is required. However, recognized, the Vehicle Security Light comes the conventional brake system will continue to operate on in the instrument panel. In this case, turn normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced still locked, try again with the other keys that come with as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer if you still brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the cannot start the engine. ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have If with the engine running the warning light flashes, this the light inspected by an authorized dealer. means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor 24. Door Ajar device. Contact an authorized dealer to have all the keys programmed. This light will turn on to indicate that one or 26. Temperature Gauge more doors or the trunk may be ajar. The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. 4 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If all the segments of the temperature gauge are lit, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap” paragraph. 27. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero. ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the digital scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel gauge and range will not immediately update accurately when refueling with the engine on. 29. Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and prevent engine damage. “Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC 30. Speedometer display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per (EVIC) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.” hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h). 28. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the right side of the vehicle. When the 4 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) The EVIC consists of the following: • System Status The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays instrument cluster. • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) • Outside Temperature Display • Trip Computer Functions • Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 EVIC Displays 4 SPORT Instrument Cluster 1 — Temperature Indicator 2 — Fuel Level Gauge 3— Clock 4 — Odometer 5 — Sport Mode 6 — Message Display 7 — Coolant Temperature Gauge 8 — Digital Speedometer 9 — Ice Warning Indicator 10 — Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) Premium Instrument Cluster 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Ice Warning Indicator Temperature Indicator Fuel Level Gauge Clock Odometer 6 — Message Display 7 — Coolant Temperature Gauge 8 — Digital Speedometer 9 — Autostick® Gear Indicator 10 — Auto/Sport/ECO Indicator 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers Press the MENU button briefly to access the menu covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu few seconds. option. Press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to return to the main screen. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) button to scroll upward through the Setup Menu Press the UP EVIC Control Buttons displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value. The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a and DOWN buttons to access cycle. Press the UP the different options and settings (setup). Press the DOWN button to scroll downward through the displayed menu and the related options The setup menu can be activated by pressing the MENU or to decrease the value displayed. or DOWN butbutton. Single presses on the UP NOTE: UP and DOWN buttons activate differ- tons will scroll through the setup menu options. The menu includes the following functions: ent functions according to the following situations: • To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards. • Speed Beep • To increase or decrease values during settings. • Trip B Data • Set Time UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 • Set Date • Exit Menu • See Radio Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu • Speed Display • Autoclose • Units • Language • Buzzer Volume • Button Volume • Daylights (D.R.L.) • Hill Start • Tire Pressure • Unlock Driver Door First • Unlock All Doors 1. Briefly press the MENU button to select the main menu option to set. or DOWN button (by single 2. Press the UP presses) to select the new setting. 3. Briefly press the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previously selected. Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu 1. Briefly press the MENU button to display the first submenu option. or DOWN button (by single 2. Press the UP presses) to scroll through all the submenu options. 4 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Briefly press the MENU button to select the displayed scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu. indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent or DOWN button (by single 4. Press the UP upon your personal driving style. presses) to select the new setting for this submenu Unless reset, this message will continue to display each option. time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN 5. Briefly press the MENU button to store the new position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and setting and go back to the previously selected subrelease the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicamenu option. tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), 6. Press and hold the MENU button to return to the main refer to the following procedure. menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold). 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (do not start the engine.) Change Engine Oil Indicator System Change Engine Oil 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly, three times within 10 seconds. Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you New Trip start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not To reset: reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. • Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system Trip Computer manually. The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It • When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or features a driver-interactive display (displays informakilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 tion such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption, (999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset autoaverage speed and travel time). matically. Trip Button • Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the The TRIP button, located on the right steering column system. stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of described values. the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor• A short button press displays the different values. mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be • A long button press resets the system and then starts a reset. new trip. 4 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Start Of Trip Procedure • Trip distance A With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for • Average consumption over one second to reset. • Instantaneous consumption Exit Trip • Average speed A To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than • Travel time A (driving time) one second. “Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu • Trip distance B screen or push and hold the MENU (approximately one • Average consumption second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings. • Average speed B Trip Functions • Travel time B (driving time) Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip). NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” can“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to: not be reset. • Range UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 Values Displayed Average Consumption Range This value shows the approximate average consumption since the last reset. This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving Instant Consumption conditions will not change. The message “----” will This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is conappear on the display in the following cases: stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the • Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km). display if the car is parked with the engine running. • The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine Average Speed running. This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a funcNOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset. style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, Travel Time etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.). This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset. Trip planning must take into account the above notes. Distance Traveled This value shows the distance covered since the last reset. 4 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) Dimmer 2. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings. The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust- Speed Beep (Speed Limit) With this function, it is possible to set the car speed limit ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly. (mph or km/h) to immediately alert the driver when the NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may set limit is exceeded. change while travelling following an event that causes switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice To set the speed limit, proceed as follows: versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on 1. Briefly press the MENU button to enter the Main avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.). MENU. To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows: or DOWN button to select Speed 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to set the 1. Press the UP or Beep. Press the MENU button, press the UP required brightness level. DOWN buttons to select Speed Limit activation (On) or deactivation (Off). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 3. When the function is activated (On), briefly press the To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: MENU button to display the presently set activation 1. Briefly press the MENU button. “On” will flash on the or DOWN buttons speed. Pressing the UP display. selects the speed limit. Press MENU to confirm 2. Press the DOWN button. “Off” will flash on the selection. display. NOTE: The setting can be increased or decreased by 5 mph or km/h each time the UP/DOWN button is 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxipressed for speed settings above 20 mph (32 km/h). To mately one second) to go back to the main screen increase or decrease the set speed rapidly, press and hold without storing the settings. the UP/DOWN button. Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you approach the required setting. Trip B Data (Trip B On) • Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi- deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display. mately one second) to go back to the main screen For further information see “Trip Computer.” without storing the settings. For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows: 1. Briefly press the MENU button. 4 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL or DOWN button to select Trip B 3. Select the required option and then press the MENU 2. Press the UP data. Press the UP or DOWN buttons to turn button. ON or OFF 4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu press the MENU button and “hours” will flash on the screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxidisplay. mately one second) to go back to the main screen or DOWN button for setting. 5. Press the UP without storing the settings. 6. Briefly press the MENU button and “minutes” will Set Time (Clock) flash on the display. This function may be used to set the clock through two or DOWN button for setting. 7. Press the UP submenu items: “Time” and “Mode.” Proceed as follows: or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP buttons to highlight Set Time — Press DOWN MENU button. 2. Press the UP or DOWN two sub-menu items. button to navigate the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 sub-menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button • The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen or DOWN button is pressed. without storing the settings. time the UP Press and hold the button to increase/decrease the Set Date setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pressing This function may be used to set the date (day - month the button when you approach the required setyear). ting. • Briefly press the MENU button to return to the To change the date proceed as follows: NOTE: “Time” sub-function. or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP button to highlight Date, press the DOWN • When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly press MENU button and Year will begin to flash. the MENU button. The previously set display format will flash on the display. or DOWN button for setting. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to select 3. Briefly press the MENU button and “month” will flash • Press the UP “24h” or “12h.” on the display. When you have selected the required settings, briefly 4. Press the UP press the MENU button to go back to the Time, Mode or DOWN button for setting. 4 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5. Briefly press the MENU button and “day” will flash • Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning activation or AutoSTore. on the display. 6. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. • CD audio, CD MP3: track number. NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system or DOWN button is pressed. info displaying proceed as follows: each time the UP Press and hold the UP or DOWN button to 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP or increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting button to highlight See Radio and press Down by briefly pressing the button when you approach the the MENU button. required setting. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. • Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi- 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen mately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. without storing the settings. See Radio (Repeat Audio Information) With this function active, the EVIC display shows infor- If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ Radio Supplement” for further informamation relevant to the sound system. tion. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Speed Display Autoclose When this function is activated the cluster will display With this function active, the doors will automatically the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h). lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display feature, proceed as follows: To change the setting proceed as follows: or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP button to highlight Speed Display. Press button to highlight Autoclose. Press the DOWN DOWN the MENU button to enter the Speed Display MENU button to enter Autoclose MENU. MENU. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to select dis3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu play deactivation “Off”, “MPH” or “km/h”. screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxi3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu mately one second) to go back to the main screen screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxiwithout storing the settings. mately one second) to go back to the main screen. 4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 6. Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub-menu. This function may be used to set the measurement unit in three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel 7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly Economy, and Tire Pressure.” press the MENU button. Either “mpg,” “km/l ” or “l/100km” will appear on the display (according to To set the required unit, proceed as follows: the previous setting). or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP button to highlight Units. Press the If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will DOWN be displayed in “mpg.” MENU button to enter Units MENU. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to navigate the If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will be displayed in either km/l or l/100km. three sub-menus. Units (Set Units) or DOWN button for setting. 3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press 1. Press the UP the MENU button. 2. Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub-menu. 4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu: briefly press the MENU button. Either “mi” or “km” will appear on the display (according to the previous setting). 5. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly To set the required language, proceed as follows: press the MENU button. Either “°F” or “°C” will 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP or appear on the display (according to the previous button to highlight Language. Press the DOWN setting). MENU button to enter the Language MENU. or DOWN button for setting. 4. Press the UP 2. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. 5. Briefly press the MENU button to return to the Tire 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu Pressure — PSI/KPA sub-menu. screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxiWhen you have made the required settings, briefly press mately one second) to go back to the main screen the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu screen, or without storing the settings. press and hold the MENU button (approximately one Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning second) to go back to the main screen without storing the Buzzer Volume) settings. With this function the volume of the buzzer accompanyLanguage (Selecting The Language) ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to The messages can be displayed in the following lan- one of eight volume levels. guages: Italian, English, Turkce, Nederlands, Spanish, To adjust the volume proceed as follows: French, Dutch, Polish, Brasilian. 4 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP DOWN button the highlight the Buzzer Volume. DOWN button to highlight the Buzzer Volume, Press the MENU button to enter the Buzzer Volume press the MENU button. MENU. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or press and hold the MENU button (approxiscreen, or press and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen mately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. without storing the settings. Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For S.B.R. Button Volume (Button Volume Adjustment) Indication) This function may be used to adjust the volume of the This function will only be displayed after an authorized or dealer has deactivated the S.B.R. system. beep accompanying the buttons. MENU, UP buttons can be adjusted according to 8 DOWN Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) levels. This function may be used to activate / deactivate the To adjust the volume, proceed as follows: Daytime Running Lamps. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: • Fuel Econ On – turns on a fuel economy upshift light in the instrument cluster, for optimum fuel economy, when operating in base driving mode. or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the Up button to highlight Daytime Running DOWN Lamps (DRL). Press the MENU button to enter the • Fuel Econ Off – the fuel economy upshift light is disabled. DRL MENU. 2. Briefly press the MENU button. “On” or “Off” will To set the required unit, proceed as follows: flash on the display (according to previous setting). 1. Briefly press the MENU button to display the two sub-menus. or DOWN button for setting. 3. Press the UP 4. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to navigate the screen, or press and hold the button (approximately two sub-menus. one second) to go back to the main screen without 3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press storing the settings. the MENU button. GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) or DOWN button for setting. 4. Press the UP This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator 5. Briefly press the MENU button to return to the in two submenus: “Fuel Econ On” and “Fuel Econ Off.” sub-menu. 4 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When you have made the required settings, briefly press 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu screen, or screen, or press and hold the button (approximately press and hold the MENU button (approximately one one second) to go back to the main screen without second) to go back to the main screen without storing the storing the settings. settings. Tire Pressure Hill Start Assist This function will be used to display the tire pressures This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop individually for all four tires by location. on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of Proceed as follows: brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of or time after the foot has been removed from the brake 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP button to highlight the Tire Pressure. DOWN pedal. Press the MENU button to enter the Tire Pressure Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: MENU. or 1. Briefly press the MENU button. Press the UP 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to scroll through all DOWN button to highlight the Hill Start Assist. four tire pressure value locations. Press the MENU button to enter the Hill Start Assist MENU. 2. Press the UP or DOWN button for setting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 3. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu Exit Menu screen, or press and hold the button (approximately This function closes the initial menu screen. one second) to go back to the main screen. Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the main Lock screen. When Unlock Driver Door is selected, only the driver’s button to return to the first menu option Press the door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless (Speed Beep). Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock button to return to the last menu option Drivers Door is selected, you must press the RKE trans- Press the mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger (Daylights). door. When All Doors is selected, both of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “Unlock Driver Door” or “All Doors” appears. 4 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. The instructions for use are given below and we recommend you to read them carefully. Suggestions Road Safety Please, learn how to use all different radio functions (e.g. store stations) before beginning to drive. Reception Conditions RAB Radio Introduction The radio has been designed according to the specifications of the passenger compartment, with a personalized design to match the style of the dashboard. Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far away from the broadcaster. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 WARNING! Having the volume turned up high can cause the driver to not be able to hear important traffic sounds, i.e. sirens, horns, etc. Failure to hear traffic sounds and other important audible information can result in serious injury or death. Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises. Care And Maintenance Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only. Cleaning and polishing products could damage the surface. CDs • Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger marks or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the outside and clean them from the middle outwards. • Never use chemicals (e.g. antistatics or thinners or sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface of the CDs. • After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes to prevent them from being damaged. • Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high temperatures or moisture for long periods. • Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the recorded surface with pencils or pens. The presence of dirt, scratches or distortions on the CDs • Do not use CDs that are very scratched, flawed, could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is distorted, etc. Using discs like these will result in playing. For optimal playback conditions, follow these malfunctions or damage to the player. guidelines: • Only use branded CDs. 4 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • The use of original CD media is required for the best • The CD player is capable of reading most compression quality audio production. Correct operation is not systems currently in use, following the development of these systems, the reading of all compression formats guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were is not guaranteed. not correctly burned and/or with a maximum capacity above 650 Mb. Technical Specifications • Do not use commercially available protective sheets The complete system consists of: for CDs or discs, with stabilizers, etc. as they could get stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc. • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers, one speaker in each of the front doors. • If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few seconds before the system starts to play it. The CD • Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers, one speaker in each of the front pillars. player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected discs. The fact that the CD is protected from being • Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers, one speaker copied is often shown in very small letters or is in each of the rear side panels. difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may be, for example, “COPY CONTROL,” “COPY PRO- • Antenna on the car roof. TECTED,” “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A • Radio with CD/MP3 player. PC/MAC.” UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 With Alpine Premium Audio system (if equipped): • An amplifier in the trunk on the right-hand side panel. • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers. • Antenna on the car roof. • Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars. • Radio with CD/MP3 player. • Two 100 mm full range speakers, one speaker in each With BEATS Premium Audio system (if equipped): of the rear side panels. • A subwoofer in the trunk on the left-hand side panel. Quick Guide Radio Controls BUTTON TUNER A-B-C MEDIA GENERAL FUNCTIONS On Off AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) source selection Cycles A, B, C presets for AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) CD/AUX/Media Player (if equipped and present) source selection MODE Short button press Short button press Short repeated button press Short repeated button press Short repeated button press 4 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BUTTON (Mute/Pause Button) AUDIO GENERAL FUNCTIONS Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) MODE Short button press Menu activation: short button press or Adjustment type selection: press Adjustment of values: press or MENU Audio adjustments: low tones (BASS), high tones (TREBLE), left/ right balance (BALANCE), front/ rear balance (FADER) Song, Artist, Album, Genre, Playlist, Folder information (if available) in CD, Media Player and Satellite (if so equipped); Toggles RBDS information in FM Advanced functions adjustment +Vol/–Vol Volume adjustment (Information Button) Menu activation: short button press or Adjustment type selection: press Adjustment of values: press or Press + button: volume increase Press – button: volume decrease UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS Radio Station Search: • Automatic Search • Manual Search 12345 Current radio station storing Stored station recall BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS CD ejection Previous/next track play CD track fast forward/rewind Previous/next folder play (for CD-MP3) MODE Automatic search: press buttons or (long press for fast forward) Manual search: press buttons or (long press for fast forward) Long button press for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively Short button press for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively MODE Short button press Short button press Long button press Short button press or or or 4 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL General Information CD Section The radio offers the following functions: • Track selection (forward/backward) Radio Section • Fast forward/rewind through tracks • PLL tuning with FM/AM bands • CD Display function: display of track number and on mp3 discs (song title, artist) and time elapsed since start of the track • RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) • Automatic/manual station tuning • FM Multipath detector • Manual storing of 25 stations (base radio) and 40 stations (if equipped with Satellite): 15 on FM band (5 on FMA, 5 on FMB, 5 on FMC), 10 on AM band (5 on AMA, 5 on AMB), 15 on Satellite Band - if equipped (5 on SATA, 5 on SATB, 5 on SATC) • SPEED VOLUME function: Customer selectable automatic volume adjustment depending on the car speed • Automatic Stereo/Mono selection • Playing Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW WARNING! On multimedia CDs, besides audio tracks, there are data tracks too. Playing this type of CD could cause hissing at a volume that could jeopardize road safety as well as causing damage to the speakers. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 CD/MP3 Section • Graphic 7 band equalizer (if equipped) • MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG) • Separate bass/treble tone adjustment • Folder selection (previous/next) • Right/left channel balancing • Track selection (forward/backward) • Front/rear fader • Fast forward/rewind through tracks Functions And Adjustments • MP3 Display function: display of folder name, ID3- Turning The Car Radio On TAG information, time elapsed since the start of the The car radio comes on when the (ON/OFF) button track, name of the file is pressed briefly. • Playing audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit Audio Section • Mute/pause function • Soft mute function • Loudness function is on, the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it had been set higher when previously used. Turning The Car Radio Off Press the (ON/OFF) button to turn the radio off. 4 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL button again to deactivate the MUTE Press the function. The volume will gradually increase until it By pressing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly, reaches the previously set level. the following audio sources can be selected cyclically: When the volume level is changed using the dedicated • AM, FM and Satellite Bands (if equipped) controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the volSelecting The CD Function ume is adjusted to the new level selected. By briefly pressing the MEDIA button, the CD audio Audio Adjustment source can be selected (only if a CD is loaded). The functions that can be selected from the audio menu Volume Adjustment change depending on the context: AM/FM/MEDIA/ To adjust the volume, press the buttons +Vol or –Vol to SATELLITE. increase/decrease the volume. Press the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio Selecting The Radio Functions functions. After the AUDIO button is first pressed, the display will show the Bass level value for the source Press the button briefly to activate the MUTE funcactivated at that time (e.g. in FM mode the display will tion. The volume will gradually decrease and the show the wording “FM Bass +2”). wording “TUNER Mute” will be shown on the display (in radio mode) or “CD Pause” (in CD mode). Mute/Pause Function UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Use the buttons or to scroll through the Menu • USER EQUALIZER — If equipped (customized equalization adjustment) functions. To change the setting of the selected funcor buttons. tion, use the Tone Adjustment The current status of the selected function appears on the Proceed as follows: display. 1. Press AUDIO button. The functions managed by the Audio Menu are: or button to select “Bass,” “Mid2. Press the • BASS (Bass adjustment) range” or “Treble” in the AUDIO menu. • MIDRANGE (Midrange adjustment) • TREBLE (Treble adjustment) • BALANCE (right/left Balance adjustment) • FADER (front/rear Balance adjustment) 3. Press the or button or to increase/decrease the bass or treble adjustments. By pressing the or buttons briefly, the levels will change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the levels will change quickly. • LOUDNESS — If equipped (Loudness function Balance Adjustment activation/deactivation) Proceed as follows: • EQUALIZER — If equipped (activation and selection 1. Press AUDIO button. of factory equalization adjustments) 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL or 2. Press the AUDIO menu. button to set “Balance” in the 3. Press the button to increase the sound coming from the rear speakers or the button to increase the sound coming from the front speakers. 3. Press the button to increase the sound from the button to increase the sound By pressing the or buttons briefly, the levels will left speakers or the from the right speakers. change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the levels will change quickly. By pressing the or buttons briefly, the levels will change progressively. By pressing them down longer, Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs the levels will change quickly. at the same level. Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs Loudness Function — If Equipped at the same level. The Loudness function improves the volume of the sound while listening at low volumes, increasing the bass Fader Adjustment and treble. Proceed as follows: To activate/deactivate this function, select the “Loud1. Press AUDIO button. ness” setting in the AUDIO menu. The condition of the or button to set “Fader” in the function (on or off) is shown on the display for a few 2. Press the AUDIO menu. seconds by the wording “Loudness On” or “Loudness Off”. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Preset/User/Classic/Rock/Jazz Functions — If Equipped The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated. When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can only be changed by adjusting the “Bass” and “Treble” settings, whereas when the function is on, the acoustic curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select the “EQ Preset” function in the audio menu. • “Jazz” (equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound) When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the wording “EQ” lights up. User EQ Settings Function — If Equipped To set a personalized equalizer adjustment: 1. Press AUDIO button. or buttons to set EQ function. 2. Use the To activate the equalizer, use the AUDIO button or to 3. Use or buttons to select ⬙EQ User.⬙ select one of the adjustments: • “EQ User” (adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can 4. be changed by the user) 5. • “Classic” (equalizer preset for optimal classic music sound) • “Rock” (equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop music sound) Press MENU button to start adjusting equalizer. On the display a seven bar graph will appear, in which each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to be or buttons. The selected adjusted by using the bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using or buttons. 4 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 6. To store the setting, press the MENU or AUDIO • Sat ID buttons. • SiriusXM Telephone Number Menu • System Reset MENU Button Functions • Speed Volume Press the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu • On Volume Limit function. Press the MENU button again to exit the Menu function. or buttons to scroll through the menu Use the functions. To change the setting of the selected func- Speed Volume Function — If Equipped or buttons. tion, use the This function automatically adapts the volume level to The current status of the selected function appears on the the speed of the car, turning up the volume when the speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level display. inside the passenger compartment. To activate/ The functions managed by the Menu are: deactivate the function, use the buttons. The wording “Speed volume” appears on the display, followed by the • Speech Volume current status of the function: • Aux Audio Offset • Off: function deactivated • Radio Off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 • Low: function activated (low sensitivity) • High: function activated (high sensitivity) On Volume Limit – If the volume level is equal to or lower than the minimum value, the radio will come on at the minimum volume. This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the maximum volume limit when turning the radio on. • “On volume limit: off” – The radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off. The volume level can be between 0 and 40. The display shows the function status: Use the buttons or to change the setting. • “On volume limit: on” – when the radio is turned on NOTE: the volume level will be: • Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the – If the volume level is equal to or higher than the activation/deactivation of the function and not the maximum value, the radio will come on at the minimum or maximum volume value. maximum volume. – If the volume level is between the minimum and • If the battery charge is too low, the volume cannot be adjusted between the minimum and the maximum maximum values, the radio will come on at the level. same volume as before it was switched off. 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • YES — The default parameters will be restored. During such operation, the wording “Resetting” appears This function makes it possible to set the radio switching on the display. At the end of the operation, the source off mode by choosing between two methods. does not change and the previous situation will be The chosen mode appears on the display: displayed. Radio Off Function • “Radio off: 00 min” — The radio turns off in connec- Radio tion with the ignition key; the radio is turned auto(Tuner) Introduction matically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP When the car radio is turned on, the last function that position. was selected before turning it off (Radio, CD, CD MP3, • “Radio off: 20 min” — The radio turns off indepenAUX) is activated. dently from the ignition key; the radio remains on for a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has To select the Radio function when another audio source is being listened to, briefly press the TUNER button. been turned to the STOP position. Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will This function is used to restore all settings to the factory show the name (RBDS stations only) or the frequency of the selected radio station, the frequency band selected values. The options are: (e.g. FMA) and the preset button number (e.g. P1). • NO — No restore intervention. System Reset Function UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Frequency Band Selection • 15 in SAT (if so equipped) (5 SATA, 5 SATB, 5 SATC) With the Radio mode active, press the FM or AM tuner To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired recep- band and then briefly press the corresponding preset tion band. button (from 1 to 5). Each time the button is pressed the following bands are By pressing the preset button for more than 2 seconds, selected cyclically: the tuned station will be stored. Pressing the A-B-C button will change between the preset memory group in • AM, FM or SAT (if equipped) the current frequency band. Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings Automatic Tuning on the display. The radio will be tuned to last station Briefly press the or button to start the automatic selected on the respective frequency band. tuning search for the next station that can be received Preset Buttons in the selected direction. The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the If the or button is pressed for longer, the rapid following pre-selections: search is started. When the button is released, the • 15 in the FM band (5 in FMA, 5 in FMB, 5 in FMC tuner will stop on the next station that can be received. • 10 in the AM band (5 in AMA, 5 in AMB) 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Tuning This is used to manually search for stations in the preselected band. Select the desired frequency band and then press briefly or button to start the search in and repeatedly the the desired direction. If the or button is pressed longer, the fast search starts and then stops when the button is released. Stereophonic Broadcasters If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is automatically switched from Stereo to Mono. SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped SiriusXM Satellite Radio With over 130 channels, SiriusXM Satellite Radio brings you more of what you love. Get 69 channels of 100% commercial-free music, plus all of your favorite sports, news, talk and entertainment. Hear every NFL game, every NASCAR race, college sports and more. The biggest and most compelling names in talk with Howard Stern and Martha Stewart, laugh-out-loud comedy with Jamie Foxx’s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy, plus kids’ programming, world-class news, local traffic and weather. All of this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast coverage. Everything worth listening to is now on SiriusXM. A one-year SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription is included. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Conditions available at sirius.com/service terms. SiriusXM Radio U.S. service UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 You can find the SiriusXM current terms and conditions contiguous United States, D.C., and PR. Service available at http://www.sirius.com. in Canada; see www.siriuscanada.ca. Re-Subscribe To SiriusXM Satellite Radio SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Types New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with their radio. Following expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe. Press the UP/DOWN button to scroll through the Menu Functions, and the Left/Right button to change the Pressing the or buttons until ⬙All⬙ is displayed selected Set-up Menu function. will allow normal tuning to all stations. Write down the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) for your The Program Types available are: All, Pop, Rock, receiver. To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop/R&B, Country, Christian, SiriusXM Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0. Jazz/Standards, Classical, Latin/World, Sports, EnterMake sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are tainment, Talk, News, NPR, Comedy, Family & Health, correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered Religion, Traffic/Weather. correctly, then the SiriusXM subscription will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active Program Types can be selected by pressing the or buttons. The Program Type will change to the next category and the radio will then tune to first station in or buttons will tune that program type. Pressing to only the stations in that program type. 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL when installed in the customer’s vehicle. To reactivate Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A your service, either call the number listed on the display Sirius Radio or visit the provider online. When a radio needs to be replaced, the dealer will need the SIRIUS information to order a new radio (even if the CAUTION! SIRIUS subscription has lapsed). The ESN number conNeither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any tains 12 digits. errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its use in vehicles. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Conditions available at sirius.com/service terms. SiriusXM Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., & PR. Visit www.sirius.com The following are instructions for retrieving the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from FIAT 500 NAFTA model radios: To retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active when installed in the customer’s vehicle. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Satellite Radio Antenna — If Equipped • Load a CD with the equipment switched on. The first track will start to play. The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof of the vehicle. Do not place items on the roof around the or roof top antenna location. Objects placed within the line • If a CD has already been loaded, turn on the radio and of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. then briefly press the MEDIA button to select the “CD” Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the function mode. The last track listened to will start to antenna as possible. Do not place items directly on or play. above the antenna. It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal CD Player playing. If CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using Introduction good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed This chapter describes the operation of the CD player possible. only. To operate the radio, refer to the description in the CD Loading/Ejecting “Functions and Adjustments” chapter. To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the CD Player Selection motorized loading system, which will position it corTo activate the CD player built into the equipment, rectly. proceed as follows: 4 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off. key turned to ON/RUN. In this case, the radio will Possible Error Messages remain off. When the radio is turned on, the last source If the loaded CD cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been listened to before being switched off, will be activated. inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is When a CD is inserted, the display will show the symbol a reading error) the display shows the wording “CD Disc “CD” and the wording “CD Reading.” They will remain error.” displayed for the whole time required for the radio to read the CD. When this time has elapsed the radio The CD will then be ejected and the audio source activated before the CD mode selection will be heard. automatically starts playing the first track. button with the radio turned on, to Press the activate the motorized CD ejection system. After ejection, the last audio source listened to before playing the CD will be heard. A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these functions are over. At the end, with the CD mode activated, the display will show the wording “CD Disc error” for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected. If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automatically be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not resume playing until the ⬙MEDIA⬙ button is pressed to select the CD mode. The radio will switch to the last source prior to CD mode. Display Information When the CD player is operating, information will appear on the display with the following meaning: • “Track 5” indicates the CD track number. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 • “03:42” indicates the time elapsed since the start of the Pause Function track (if the relevant Menu function is activated). To pause the CD player, press the button. The wording “CD Pause” appears on the display. Track Selection Briefly press the button to play the previous CD To resume listening to the track, press the button track and the button to play the next track. The again. tracks are selected cyclically: the first track is selected CD MP3 Player after the last track and vice versa. Introduction If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds, button, starts the track again from the This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3 pressing the beginning. In this case, if you want to play the player. button twice consecu- NOTE: Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed previous track, press the tively. from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. Track Fast Forward/Rewind MP3 Mode Keep the button pressed down to fast forward the In addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also button pressed down to enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio selected track and keep the fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will files have been recorded in an MP3 format. stop once the button is released. 4 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To guarantee optimal reproduction, it is advisable to use • Tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced. good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible. NOTE: The track names must not include the following The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that characters: spaces, ‘ (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks brackets). During the burning of a MP3 CD, make sure (folders or subfolders are all on the same level). The that the names of the files do not contain these characters; folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected. if not, the radio will not be able to play the tracks involved. The specifications and operating conditions for playing Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs MP3 files are the following: • The CD-ROMs used should be burned in accordance If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced, CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files, the radio automatiwith ISO standard 9660. cally starts playing the audio session. It is possible to • The music files should have the extension “.mp3” or move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the “.wma” files with a different extension will not be CD button pressed for more than two seconds. reproduced. • The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are: 44.1 kHz, stereo (from 96 to 320 kbit/s) – 22.05 kHz, mono or stereo (from 32 to 80 kbit/s). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 NOTE: When the function is activated the radio may take Selection Of Next/Previous Folder a few seconds to start playing. While checking the disc Press the button to select a next folder or the the display will show “CD Reading.” If no MP3 files are button to select the previous folder. The display detected, the radio will resume playing the audio session will show the number of the folder. from the point where it was interrupted. The folders are selected cyclically. The first folder is Display Information selected after the last folder and vice versa. ID3–Tag Information Display If no other folder/track is selected in the next two In addition to the information relating to the time seconds, the first track on the new folder will be played. elapsed, folder name and file name, the radio is also After the last track in a folder is played, the next folder capable of displaying ID3–TAG information relating to will be played. Title Track, Artist and Author. Structure Of The Folders When one of the ID3-TAG pieces of information is chosen to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album) and this informa- The radio with MP3 player: tion has not been recorded for the track played, the text • Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain ⬙UNKNOWN⬙ will be displayed for that field. MP3 format files. 4 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • If the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in CD Player sub-folders their structure is compressed to a single The CD Does Not Play: level structure, where the sub-folders are taken to the The CD is dirty. Clean the CD. level of the main folders. The CD is scratched. Try using another CD. Troubleshooting General The CD Can Not Be Loaded: Sound Volume Low A CD is already loaded. Press the the CD. button and remove The Fader function should be adjusted to the values “F” (front) only to prevent the reduction in radio output MP3 File Reading power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files: adjustment is equal to R+9. The CD is scratched or dirty. Source Can Not Be Selected The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD to Displayed: be listened to. In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped) Refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) — If Equipped 4 A Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) is available as optional equipment for this vehicle, refer to the Navigation User Guide for further information. iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED USB/AUX Port This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be 1 — iPod® Or External USB Device Holder 2 — Cable Jack plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart- 3 — USB Connector ment. Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ radio User’s Manual for iPod® or external USB device support capability. 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a The remote sound system controls are located on the rear pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom access the switches. of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ CD/AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/enter an item while scrolling through menu. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode. Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Radio Operation Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next Equipped) listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ User’s Manual for further information. will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE will tune to the next preset station that you have proTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following grammed in the radio preset pushbutton. precautions: CD Player Operation 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface. track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchIf you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. ing the disc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays. 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation. too high. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular CLIMATE CONTROLS disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) The air conditioning and heating system is designed to oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known make you comfortable in all types of weather. good disc before considering disc player service. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 1. Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. 2. Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds. 3. Recirculation Control Manual Temperature Control (MTC) Rotate this control to change the system between recirThe Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be dials and one inner push knob. used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. • Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se- for maximum airflow to the rear. • Bi-Level lect the outside air position for maximum defogging. Air is directed through the panel and floor • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for outlets. Defrost. • Floor • The A/C can be deselected manually without disAir is directed through the floor outlets with a turbing the mode control selection. small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets. 4. Mode Control • Mix Rotate this control to change the system between Modes Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost). side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. • Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. MAX A/C For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation modes at the same time. ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is Equipped not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the • The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes driver to select individual comfort settings. only when necessary. • The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience. 5. A/C Button Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light • The system can be controlled manually, if desired. will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged. 4 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The ATC system automatically maintains the interior between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to comfort level desired by the driver and passenger. “Automatic Operation” for more information. 2. A/C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning (A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 3. Temperature Control Up Button Provides temperature up control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings. 4. Blower Control Up Button Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) 1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed increases as you press this button. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 5. Mix Mode Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recirculation automatically. Press and release to select. Per- Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side winforming this function will cause the ATC to switch dow demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 snowy conditions that require extra heat to the wind- Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch shield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while into manual mode. reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing this NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers 6. Front Defrost for maximum airflow to the rear. Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when ON. The blower will automatically default to medium-high if the Defrost mode is selected. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 7. Floor Mode 9. Blower Control Down Button There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed decreases as you press this button. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. 10. Temperature Control Down Button Provides temperature down control. Push the button for Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small cooler temperature settings. amount flowing through the defrost and side window 11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button demister outlets. 8. Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF. 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature conPress and release to change the current setting. The trol buttons. Once the desired temperature is disindicator illuminates when ON. played, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. NOTE: 12. Recirculation Control Button • When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is flash if pressed. This indicates that you can not not necessary to change the settings. You will experiproceed to this mode due to fogging risk. ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. • When the Auto indicator is on and the Recirculation indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If NOTE: the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for setting is manual and Recirculation is on. cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts Automatic Operation the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. 1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric when on. units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Blower Control Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features” in this section of the manual. There are 12 fixed blower speeds. Use the blower control up or down buttons To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic to regulate the amount of air forced mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain through the system in any mode you on low until the engine warms up. The blower will select. The blower speed increases as increase in speed and transition into AUTO mode. you press or hold the blower control up button and decreases when you Manual Operation press or hold the blower control down button. This system offers a full complement of manual override The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by features. pressing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan NOTE: Each of these features operates independently will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, are selected. This allows the front occupants to control temperature control will continue to operate automati- the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the cally. AUTO mode. The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions. 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause Air comes from the outlets in the instrument the ATC to switch into manual mode. panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the Mix Mode center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. while keeping the windshield clear. Panel Mode Floor Mode Defrost Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount Air comes from the windshield and side window of air is directed through the defrost and side demister outlets. Use Defrost mode with maxiwindow demister outlets. mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, Bi-Level the blower will automatically default to medium-high. Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed. will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually Recirculation Control selected to clear the windshield and side glass. When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidAir Conditioning (A/C) ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning control button. Recirculation mode should only be used system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate when temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air this button is selected. Push the button a second time to outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and air into the vehicle. deactivate the A/C system. NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may NOTE: lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (indicator light shall blink) if • If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Conto prevent fogging of the windows. trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost 4 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases, turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort. blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the Defrost mode. Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging. NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. Summer Operation As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to NOTE: In some cases during high temperature operadirect air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature tion, the air conditioning system performance may be control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher reduced. This is to help protect the engine from overheating during the high load condition. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system. When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode. Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility Winter Operation of compressor damage when the air conditioning system When operating the system during the winter months, is started again. make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions. 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .225 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .225 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .228 . . .231 . . .233 . . .233 . . .233 . . .235 . . .240 5 222 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .250 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .250 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .252 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .257 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 䡵 SPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .248 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .249 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .264 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .265 STARTING AND OPERATING 223 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .270 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .283 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .273 ▫ Enhanced System — If Equipped . . . ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ Premium TPM System . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Engine ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo . ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .282 . . . . . . .284 . . . . . . .287 . . . . . . .289 . . . . . . .289 . . . . . . .293 . . . . . . .294 . . . . . . .294 . . . . . . .295 . . . . . . .295 . . . . . . .295 . . . . . . .296 5 224 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .301 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 STARTING AND OPERATING 225 STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission — If Equipped Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch WARNING! pedal is pressed to the floor. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Automatic Transmission — If Equipped access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or position before you can start the engine. Depress the others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear. dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or out of PARK. in a location accessible to children). A child could Normal Starting operate power windows, other controls, or move NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm the vehicle. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. 5 226 STARTING AND OPERATING Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold position and release it when the engine starts. If the start. engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 CAUTION! seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. Use of the recommended oil and adhering to the Cold Weather Operation prescribed oil change intervals is important to preTo prevent possible engine damage while starting at low vent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking in cold conditions. when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) Extended Park Starting and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. An externally- NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle powered electric engine block heater is available as has not been started or driven for at least 35 days. optional equipment or from your authorized dealer. 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts. STARTING AND OPERATING 227 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure. 4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts, allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure. If Engine Fails To Start WARNING! Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. Turbocharger “Cool Down” This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending 5 228 STARTING AND OPERATING on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time. MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED Five-Speed Manual Transmission WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. Shift Lever Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. NOTE: To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, lift the ring under the knob and, at the same time move the gearshift lever to the right and then backward. STARTING AND OPERATING 229 Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when stop spinning. Should an unwanted clash noise be prostarting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch duced, the pause length should be increased. can result from starting in third gear. NOTE: For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only • Clashing REVERSE gear, especially if vehicle is movthe lower gears. For steady highway driving with light ing, can result in transmission damage. accelerations, fifth gear is recommended. Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, • During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transpedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear mission. on the clutch. REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear. When selecting REVERSE gear, the driver should pause (approximately 2 seconds) after pushing in the clutch pedal 5 230 STARTING AND OPERATING Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following table. Engine Size 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units In mph (km/h) Acceleration 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 Rate Accel 14 23 29 (23) (37) (47) Cruise 12 18 25 (19) (29) (40) 4 to 5 38 (61) 32 (52) STARTING AND OPERATING 231 When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade, Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened. prolong engine life. Downshifting CAUTION! If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released). AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade. NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. 5 232 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 233 Key Ignition Park Interlock Six-Speed Automatic Transmission This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK. The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission hundred miles (kilometers). out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. 5 234 STARTING AND OPERATING The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick® position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick® (+/-) position Shift Lever (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick® mode, the Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, shifting between these gears. and NEUTRAL. STARTING AND OPERATING 235 the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a NEUTRAL into another gear range. downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to grade. allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. WARNING! Gear Ranges PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. (Continued) 5 236 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the ignition key/Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 237 CAUTION! • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) The following indicators should be used to ensure that Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be tion: started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift • When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. 5 238 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to the AutoStick® in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller will expand the STARTING AND OPERATING 239 range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat- can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: ing. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may 1. Stop the vehicle. be modified depending on engine coolant temperature. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. ture has risen to a suitable level. Transmission Limp Home Mode 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. 5 240 STARTING AND OPERATING If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument service is required. cluster. AUTOSTICK® NOTE: In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will only AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever providing manual shift control, giving you more control rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below. of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down- • The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed. shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during • The transmission will automatically downshift as the passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will driving, and many other situations. display the current gear. Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (beside the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever • The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. • You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or third gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful STARTING AND OPERATING 241 in snow or icy conditions. To select second or third AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift off the accelerator pedal. lever rearward (+) once or twice. • The system will ignore shift commands that would cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested. • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged because the transmission will not shift automatically. WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Acceleration AutoStick® is engaged. • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull fault or overheat condition is detected. erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to when there is a difference in the surface traction under the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the the front (driving) wheels. 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). Traction 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. DRIVING THROUGH WATER When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/ wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so. WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through (Continued) 5 244 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. STARTING AND OPERATING 245 WARNING! Continued operation with reduced or no power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed the EVIC screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to be If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle taken to an authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Elecneeds to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is tronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER- NOTE: ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer EVIC screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuoperational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. vers may have occurred which caused an over temperaUnder these conditions there will be a substantial ture condition in the power steering system. Once drivincrease in steering effort, especially at low speeds and ing conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle during parking maneuvers. for a few moments until the icon and message turn off. • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service. 5 246 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely. Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake STARTING AND OPERATING 247 should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE or first (1st) gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. 5 248 STARTING AND OPERATING SPORT MODE Manual Transmission — If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal-to-engine response. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering. 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. SPORT Button Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal. 3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate. STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmission shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering. 5 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. SPORT Button Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode. 250 STARTING AND OPERATING BRAKE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example; repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that required with the power system operating. Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC. capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conWarning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to use. modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal. STARTING AND OPERATING 251 The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary. WARNING! • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system. Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly. 5 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! • The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and STARTING AND OPERATING 253 stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • Vehicle must be stopped. • Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or 7% grade or greater (automatic transmission) hill. • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). 5 254 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the Disabling/Enabling HSA driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be When the actual path does not match the intended path, done using the Customer Programmable Features in the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa- • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. tion. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 255 5 ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission) ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission) NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering column (Manual Transmission Only). 256 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes. Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below. Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. STARTING AND OPERATING 257 To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation. WARNING! (Continued) reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And mode by pressing the switch. Once the situation requir- ESC OFF Indicator Light ing ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR WARNING! (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature dehas been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power (Continued) 5 258 STARTING AND OPERATING 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as NOTE: possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. • The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the each time the ignition switch is turned ON. tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also will be ON even if it was turned off previously. flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accelThe ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially driving to the prevailing road conditions. off. STARTING AND OPERATING 259 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings NOTE: • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades • LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 5 260 STARTING AND OPERATING • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards T or S = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) STARTING AND OPERATING 261 EXAMPLE: R = Construction code – ⬙R⬙ means radial construction – ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) 5 262 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: Load Identification: ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load (LL) = Light load tire C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) STARTING AND OPERATING 263 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. 5 B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in this section. STARTING AND OPERATING 267 To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs the weight referenced here. (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [295 kg]). Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occubeing loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. capacity calculated in step 4. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. 5 268 STARTING AND OPERATING • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your (392 kg). trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. NOTE: STARTING AND OPERATING 269 5 270 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety • Economy • Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 271 WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. NOTE: • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. At least once a month: • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual 5 272 STARTING AND OPERATING judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with inflated. temperature changes. • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition. “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 build up or your tire pressure will be too low. mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and WARNING! within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires. equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria: • The tire has not been driven on when flat. • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). • The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm). 5 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped additional information. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code). thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all Tire Types season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on All Season Tires — If Equipped the tire sidewall. All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. STARTING AND OPERATING 275 If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full tire inflation pressures. capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode. and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforpoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation. hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. 5 276 STARTING AND OPERATING rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a tire rotation pattern. spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped In Emergencies” for further information. Spare Tires — If Equipped CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle on your vehicle at the first opportunity. of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING! Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Full Size Spare — If Equipped original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the 5 278 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. STARTING AND OPERATING 279 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer replaced. to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style • Tire pressure • Distance driven 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended. 5 280 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a with oil, grease, and gasoline. wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match Replacement Tires those of the original wheels. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. (Continued) CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. 5 282 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage: • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. • Install on Front Tires. • Due to limited clearance, a 185/55R15 tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended. WARNING! Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. CAUTION! To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. • Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 283 CAUTION! (Continued) • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. 5 284 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed. Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will STARTING AND OPERATING 285 also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- order for the TPMS to receive this information. sure. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or (20° C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire natural pressure loss through the tire. pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire presPressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system sure value. will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be 5 286 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve (Continued) stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain STARTING AND OPERATING 287 correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Receiver Module. and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. the tire. Base System • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumiinstrument cluster. nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev- xxx.x psi” text message will display when one or more of els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate Module. each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update 5 288 STARTING AND OPERATING and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals. once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. Check TPMS Warnings 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and spare wheel and tire assembly. the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text mes1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure sage will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monisequence will repeat providing the system fault still tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire. exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road system fault can occur with any of the following scetire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnnarios: ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to will still turn ON due to the low tire. facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. STARTING AND OPERATING 289 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. Enhanced System — If Equipped When the vehicle is equipped with an enhanced TPM system, the driver can view text messages showing the actual tire pressure value by position by selecting the tire 4. This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a pressure menu command in the instrument cluster. Refer chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring to the instrument panel features section of the owners Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and manual. then remain on solid. Premium TPM System 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver module • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors 5 290 STARTING AND OPERATING • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with Low Tire Indicator the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible color. and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need STARTING AND OPERATING 291 to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message in the EVIC for approximately 5 seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. 5 Service TPM System Message If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. 292 STARTING AND OPERATING shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving located in the correct vehicle position. The system still next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as needs to be serviced as long as the ⬙Service Tire Pressure the TPM sensors. Monitoring System⬙ message is displayed. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains NOTE: materials that may block radio wave signals. • The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor. wheel housings. • If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and The EVIC will also display a ⬙Service Tire Pressure a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the Monitoring System⬙ message for a minimum of five EVIC will still display a pressure value highlighted in seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect a different color. sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the ⬙Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ message is then fol- • After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above lowed with a graphic display with pressure values still 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring A system fault can occur due to any of the following: STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will order for the TPMS to receive this information. display a “Service TPM System” message and then General Information display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and • For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” following conditions: will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a “Service Tire Pres- • This device may not cause harmful interference. sure Monitoring System” message and dashes (- -) in • This device must accept any interference received, place of the pressure value. including interference that may cause undesired operation. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addi- The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the tion, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will following licenses: turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new MRXC4W4MA4 pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire United States pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4 of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be (Single) 5 294 STARTING AND OPERATING FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Engine FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo This engine is designed to meet all emisThis engine is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide satisfactory sion regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when usfuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded ⬙regular⬙ gasoing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 87. line with a minimum octane rating of 87. For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended. 91 octane or higher is recommended. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 295 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. CAUTION! Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline fuel system components. blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- does not have the negative effects of Methanol. genates such as 10% Ethanol, Methyl Tert-Butyl Ether E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (MTBE), and Ethyl Tret-Butyl Ether (ETBE). Oxygenates Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoare required in some areas of the country during the line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 296 STARTING AND OPERATING If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is • Operate in a lean mode. blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without • Poor engine performance. MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug • Poor cold start and cold drivability. life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, E-85 perform the following: therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer). and California reformulated gasoline. • Change the engine oil and oil filter. Materials Added To Fuel • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the All gasoline sold in the United States is required to engine controller memory. contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged detergents or other additives is not needed under normal exposure to E-85 fuel. STARTING AND OPERATING 297 conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. 5 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every (Continued) time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 299 CAUTION! (Continued) cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. WARNING! • Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire. (Continued) (Continued) Fuel Filler Cap CAUTION! 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is NOTE: properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message is full. will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This • Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected click. This is an indication that the cap is properly twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off. tightened. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. • If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will TRAILER TOWING come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. the vehicle is refueled. STARTING AND OPERATING 301 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Dolly Tow Front Rear ALL On Trailer Manual Transmission Transmission in NEUTRAL OK NOT ALLOWED OK Automatic Transmission NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer legal highway speed, for any distance, if the manual provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. transmission is in NEUTRAL. This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with the front wheels OFF the ground). Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) at any CAUTION! DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. 5 302 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .305 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .305 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 ▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . ▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .307 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 ▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 . . . . . .318 . . . . . .319 . . . . . .319 . . . . . .322 . . . . . .322 . . . . . .328 . . . . . .330 . . . . . .331 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 6 304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .338 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 ▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the instrument panel below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Do not use this emergency warning system when the an impending overheat condition: vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers to high. This allows the heater core to act as a may wear down your battery. 6 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 TIREFIT Storage TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation The TIREFIT kit is located under the front driver’s seat. 6 TIREFIT Components TIREFIT Kit Location 1 2 3 4 — — — — Sealant Bottle Deflation Button Pressure Gauge Power Button 5 — Mode Select Knob 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) 8 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of TIREFIT Kit) 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode Using The Deflation Button Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. TIREFIT Usage Precautions Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant position for air pump operation only. Use the Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Selecting Sealant Mode Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this Hose Replacement”. position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode. Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit. • You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose TIREFIT Expiration Date Location (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting tire application use and need to be replaced after each sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only inuse. Always replace these components immediately at tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter your original equipment vehicle dealer. in the tread of your vehicle. • When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses. water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from 6 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit. • Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4” (6 mm) or larger. – If the tire has any sidewall damage. – If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. – If the wheel has any damage. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. • Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat source. • A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. (Continued) (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 WARNING! (Continued) • TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT (A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT: 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition. 4. Set the parking brake. (B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT: 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the from the fitting at the end of the hose. deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the 6 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire. valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit. NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire. (C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire: • Always start the engine before turning ON the TIREFIT kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn On the TIREFIT kit. 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the available. Make sure the engine is running before parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. turning ON the TIREFIT kit. • After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance. Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes: Sealant Hose (6): • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflaseconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 mended inflation pressure before continuing. psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: empty. 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit. 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure ment panel. indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side 6 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.” (D) Drive Vehicle: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h). CAUTION! • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit. WARNING! TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. (E) After Driving: Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT” before continuing. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air If Mode position. 1. 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening. 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflastem. tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3). 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): Volt outlet. The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the the vehicle further. Call for assistance. vehicle. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center. 6 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posthe front of the housing. Press the bottle into the sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacehousing. An audible click will be heard indicating the ment”. bottle is locked into place. NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its using the TIREFIT service kit. storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: 7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). vehicle. 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS recessed area under the sealant bottle. 3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the of it accordingly. vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous- properly calibrated torque wrench. ing. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. Torque Specifications Lug Nut/ Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Bolt Size 66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m) Steel Wheels Only 75 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m) Aluminum Wheels Only M12 x 1.25 Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket Size 17 mm 6 **Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Wheel Mounting Surface 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 WARNING! (Continued) under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location 6 Jack And Jack-Handle Location Spare Tire Removal The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the the front driver’s seat. cargo area. 1. Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area. 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Winch Access Plug 2. Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut. Use the wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle. Lowering/Raising Spare Tire CAUTION! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench tool only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle. 4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel. 6 Spare Tire Retainer 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). 5. Turn Off the ignition. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked. Jacking Instructions WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. (Continued) 6 Jack Warning Label 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of the “Tires-General Information” under “Starting And Operating” for information about the spare tire, it’s use, and operation. CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the driver’s seat. 2. Remove center cap. Center Cap Removal NOTE: Before using the swivel wrench to remove the wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into the notched part of the center cap. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 3. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding). 6 Rear Jacking Location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. 4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the Front Jacking Location 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 5. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. Jack Location 6. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts. For vehicles equipped with steel wheels the wheel covers must be removed to remove the wheel bolts. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. CAUTION! Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. WARNING! To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges. 7. Install the spare wheel and wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. 9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each bolt has been tightened twice. For the correct wheel bolt torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealership or service station. 10. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the 6 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor 12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible. of the vehicle. Correct the tire pressure as required. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the 11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Have cover. the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible. WARNING! A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 3. Install the four wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 — Valve Stem 2 — Valve Notch 3 — Wheel Bolt 4 — Wheel Cover 5 — Road Wheel 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 5. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for correct wheel bolt torque. 6 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are wrench while at the end of the handle for increased properly seated against the wheel. leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for correct wheel bolt torque. Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are 2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the cone shaped properly seated against the wheel. end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the Spare Tire Stowage wheel bolts. Reverse instructions of the spare removal section. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 CAUTION! WARNING! The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power tool may damage the winch. Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. 6 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jump-Start The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. Battery Posts 1 — Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap) 2 — Negative (-) Post WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri- Jump-Starting Procedure cal accessories. 3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover. 4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. WARNING! Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 6 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster negative (-) post of the booster battery. battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper battery. cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables and the fuel injection system. in the reverse sequence: WARNING! Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear you should have the battery and charging system in- and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelspected at your authorized dealer. erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the CAUTION! engine. Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not CAUTION! in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to plugged in long enough without engine operation, transmission overheating and failure. Allow the enthe vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from least one minute after every five rocking-motion starting. cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE efforts to free a stuck vehicle. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE 6 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. CAUTION! • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 3. Remove the shift lever override access cover (located 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. on the right side of the shift lever housing) by prying 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the at the bottom edge of the cover. access hole, and push and hold the override release lever in. 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover. 6 Shift Lever Override Access Hole 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Flatbed Wheels OFF The Ground NONE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NOT ALLOWED Rear Front ALL NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD MANUAL TRANSMISSION If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 65 mph (104 km/h) max speed NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent CAUTION! (Continued) damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above reequipment designed for this purpose, following equipquirements can cause severe transmission damage. ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is Damage from improper towing is not covered unmandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding Automatic Transmission vehicles under tow must be observed. • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off position. the ground). CAUTION! • DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. (Continued) If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing. 6 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! CAUTION! • DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the Manual Transmission power remains intact, depending on the nature of the • Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the event the ORC will determine whether to have the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. ing functions: • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off • Cut off fuel to the engine. the ground). • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you the battery has power or until the ignition key is must follow the system reset procedure. removed. Customer Action Customer Will See • Unlock the doors automatically. 1. Turn ignition OFF. After the event occurs, when the system is active, the (Turn Signal Switch Must message ⬙Fuel Cutoff See Handbook⬙ is displayed. be placed in Neutral State). Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine 2. Turn ignition ON. Left Turn Light is OFF. compartment and on the ground near the engine comRight Turn Light partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and BLINKS. starting the engine. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Right Turn Light is ON System Reset Procedure Switch ON. SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. After an impact causing airbag deployment, the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Left Turn Light is ON cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned Switch ON. SOLID. Right Turn Light off. BLINKS. 6 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 8. Turn ignition OFF. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .346 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .347 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 ▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .374 7 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .375 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ Convertible Top Care – If Equipped . . . . . . . .384 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . .395 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 ▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 ▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam . . . . . .393 ▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .396 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L 7 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 5 6 7 8 — Battery — Air Cleaner Filter — Engine Oil Fill — Washer Fluid Reservoir 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 5 — Battery 6 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 7 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part ready for testing. of a normal bulb check. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen: serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. the ignition or start the engine. This means that your Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if not proceed to the I/M station. your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully following: illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system not crank or start the engine. is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your start this test over. authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself. before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil running. penalties being assessed against you. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. 7 WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a (Continued) 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range. CAUTION! Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine. Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first. 7 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Engine American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all Identification Symbol types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only This symbol means that the oil has recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet been certified by the American the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Petroleum Institute (API). The Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine manufacturer only recommends For best performance and maximum protection under all API Certified engine oils. types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Engine (SAE Grade) Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine SAE 5W-30 engine oil recommended for all operating (SAE Grade) temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low starting and vehicle fuel economy. temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certimended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. are followed. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartber should not be used. ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended tion. engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. 7 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomyour area. mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes Engine Oil Filter are followed. The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter Materials Added To Engine Oil at every engine oil change. Synthetic Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filters and are recommended. oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filter indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service maintenance intervals. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with (Continued) 7 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the (Continued) Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 WARNING! CAUTION! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If Equipped R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. 7 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the lower right of center console. Perform the following HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro- procedure to replace the filter: fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen- 1. Remove the Torx® screw that secures the passenger tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product side console closeout cover. with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf — If Equipped NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. A/C Air Filter WARNING! Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result. Torx® Screw Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage the front retaining tab and remove the cover. 7 Air Filter Cover Screw Locations 4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing. Take note of the air filter position Console Closeout Panel indicators. 3. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (1 and 2) that secure the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing. 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. 6. Install the passenger side console closeout. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Body Lubrication A/C Air Filter Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as 5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, indicators pointing in the same direction as removal. tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforWiper Blades mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help reduce streaking and smearing. 7 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first. 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the 2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper liftgate glass. blade off of the liftgate glass. 3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder. 1 — Wiper Arm 2 — Pivot Cap MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! 1 2 3 4 — — — — Wiper Blade Blade Pivot Pin Wiper Arm Wiper Blade Holder 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place. Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. 7 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. 7 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System age: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is months (before the onset of freezing weather, where needed to be added to the system please contact your applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or local authorized dealer. rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti- Selection Of Coolant freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Coolant Checks CAUTION! Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS12106). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with (Continued) 7 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant NOTE: that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concenproperly. Failure to fill these systems properly could trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is −34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water mended and can result in cooling system damage. If will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, engine cooling system. have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible. tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where Cooling System Pressure Cap the vehicle is operated. The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank. 7 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check WARNING! with your local authorities to determine the disposal • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by anicooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground pressure to build up in the cooling system. To spills immediately. prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL RANGE”. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac- • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the month. coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to bottle must also be protected against freezing. maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Points To Remember required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to from the front of the engine compartment. This is norMS-12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high protection of your engine which contains aluminum humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporcomponents. ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. 7 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Brake System WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency. Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked In order to assure brake system performance, all brake when performing under hood services, or immediately if system components should be inspected periodically. the “Brake Warning Light” is on. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before maintenance intervals. removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system. The two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one system will not affect the other system. The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See your local authorized dealer for service. Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may (Continued) 7 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission. Manual Transmission — If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water. NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately. Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid 7 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe adversely affect seals. transmission damage. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion? Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The most common causes are: • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild resistance built into your vehicle. car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. 7 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and Tar Remover to remove. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s packaged and sealed. protective coating that helps keep them from corroding • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider and tarnishing. mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel surface. match the color of your vehicle. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or CAUTION! Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. These products and automatic car washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. 7 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion. Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels CAUTION! If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped Interior Care Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting. ner: Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for with a clean, dry towel. leather upholstery. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular • For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather protectants on Stain Repel products. upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. 7 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. CAUTION! Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winCleaning Headlights dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore scratch the elements. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are directly on the mirror. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive protectants or other products which may cause undesircleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the rag. low glare surface. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Instrument Panel Bezels Seat Belt Maintenance CAUTION! When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully. Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface. Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. 7 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). Convertible Top Care – If Equipped CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: • Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips. • Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior. • Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior. NOTE: Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present. Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended. Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not before washing the top. The top should be washed with subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use top and storage compartment. detergent. Washing Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material. If you must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are preferred. CAUTION! Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips. CAUTION! Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches. Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area. Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from General Cleaning the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering. in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, 7 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your local authorized dealer for further suggestions. FUSES WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel. 7 Fuse Panel Cavity 1 2 Vehicle Fuse Number F12 F32 Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan Description Right Low Beam Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Mini Fuse Description 3 4 5 Vehicle Fuse Number F53 F38 F36 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 6 7 8 9 10 F43 F48 F13 F50 F51 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan 11 12 F37 F49 5 Amp Tan 5 Amp Tan 13 F31 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node Central Door Locking Diagnostic Socket, Car Radio, Climate Control System Bi-Directional Washer Passenger Power Window Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling Airbag Car Radio Switch, Climate Control System, Stop Light, Clutch Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor Ignition, Climate Control Cavity MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Cavity 14 Vehicle Fuse Number F47 Mini Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Description Driver Power Window Underhood Fuses The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover. 7 Front Distribution Unit The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover. 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F11 F14 F15 Maxi Fuse 60 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Orange 70 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Green 40 Amp Orange 40 Amp Orange Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan 15 Amp Blue Description Body Controller Audio Amplifier Ignition Switch Anti-Lock Brake Pump Electric Power Steering Radiator Fan - Single Speed Radiator Fan - Low Speed Radiator Fan - High Speed Blower Motor Powertrain Horn Powertrain Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) High Beam (Shutter) Cigar Lighter MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Cavity F16 F17 F17 F18 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F30 F82 F83 F84 Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 25 Amp White 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 5 Amp Tan 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 30 Amp Green 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red Description Transmission Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Powertrain Powertrain Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Air Conditioning Heated Seats – If Equipped Fuel Pump Powertrain Anti-Lock Brake Valves Stability Control System Fog Lamps Sunroof/Convertible Top Cooling Pump – If Equipped Transmission 7 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F85 F87 F90 Maxi Fuse 30 Amp Green (ATO) VEHICLE STORAGE Mini Fuse 5 Amp Tan 5 Amp Tan Description Rear Defroster Rear Defroster Heated Mirrors – If Equipped REPLACEMENT BULBS If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your Interior Bulbs battery. Overhead Lamp • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Courtesy Lamp service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Exterior Bulbs in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Front Low and High possibility of compressor damage when the system is Beam Headlamp started again. Front Parking/Daytime Bulb Number C5W W5W Bulb Number HIR2 W21/5W MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Bulb Number Running Lamps Front Fog Lamps Front Side Marker Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps Side Direction Lamps Rear Turn Signal Lamps Rear Side Marker Lamps Rear Tail and Stop Lamps Rear Backup Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp License Plate Lamps H11 W3W WY21W WY5W PY21W W3W P21/5W W16W W5W LED (See Authorized dealer) Bulb Number NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing. 2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise. 7 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place. 5. Reinstall the plastic cap. Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps 1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right. 2. Open the wheel housing access door. Wheel Housing Access Door 3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp housing. 4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise. 5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps clockwise into lamp locking it in place. 1. Open the liftgate. 7. Reinstall the plastic cap. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp Front Fog Lamps assembly. To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer. Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps 1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand access to side marker lamp. 7 2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing. 3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement bulb. 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place. 5. Reinstall the wheel liner. Tail Lamp Assembly Screws 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from 4. the lamp housing. 5. 4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing them slightly and turning counter-clockwise. 6. 5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out. 7. 6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws. 2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly. 3. Disconnect the electric connector. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and replace it. Close the back cap locking it properly. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the guard caps. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) Engine Oil with Filter 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Cooling System 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Manual Transmission 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Automatic Transmission U.S. 10.5 Gallons Metric 40 Liters 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters 4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters 7 5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Engine Oil - 1.4L Engine Engine Oil - 1.4L Turbo Engine Engine Oil Filter - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Component Spark Plugs - 1.4L Engine Spark Plugs - 1.4L Turbo Engine Fuel Selection - 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs 87 Octane Acceptable — 91 Octane Recommended Chassis Component Manual Transmission – If Equipped Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder Convertible Top Rails Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid Use only MOPAR® AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use Berulub FR 43. 7 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 8 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle indicator system. The oil change indicator system will Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Instrument Panel” for further information. scheduled maintenance. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, indicator message will illuminate. This means that serwhichever comes first. vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Severe Duty All Models cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Reis operated in a dusty and off road environment. This quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditype of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next • Check engine oil level. 500 miles (805 km). Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Check windshield washer fluid level. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage. • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, and fill as needed. • Check function of all interior and exterior lights. Required Maintenance Intervals. Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter. • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. • Inspect brake pads, rotors, and hoses. • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. • Check and adjust hand brake. • Inspect exhaust system. • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. 8 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Maintenance Chart Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings. Replace as necessary. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Inspect parking brake function. Adjust as necessary. Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. Replace cabin air filter. Clean and lube sun roof tracks. Replace spark plugs (1.4L Engine). ** Replace spark plugs (1.4L Turbo Engine). ** 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. Replace the timing belt. ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. X X X X MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .414 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 ▫ FIAT Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 9 410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the 9 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FIAT Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Phone: 1–800–423–6343 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. FIAT Canada Customer Center They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1–800– • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- 465–2001 (English) Phone: 1–800–387–9983 (French) cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech center. Impaired (TDD/TTY) Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenTo assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the ter should include the following information: manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni• Owner’s name and address cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413 (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French). manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents. repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited We appreciate that you have made a major investment Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related have any questions about the service contract, call the concerns. manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. 9 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy WARRANTY INFORMATION campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the individual problems between you, your authorized DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC dealer, and the manufacturer. warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/ PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. 9 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Diagnostic Procedure Manuals • Call toll free at: Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) Owner’s Manuals These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or • Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417 Treadwear concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled WARNING! conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on times as well on the government course as a tire graded straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart peak traction characteristics. significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- Temperature Grades teristics and climate. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat Traction Grades and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all 9 418 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. INDEX 10 420 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 51 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 56, 81, 150 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 48, 51 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . .45, 48, 51 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .354 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . .356, 357, 358 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .209, 211, 356 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 397 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .211 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 375, 376 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 INDEX 421 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 392 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .19 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 372 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 393 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .397 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 402 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 298 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 347 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 10 422 INDEX Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Child Restraints Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .69 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .65 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .205 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Convertible Top Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397, 398 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 370 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369, 371 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 INDEX 423 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 210, 211, 216 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .122 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .160 Exit Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 New Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Start Of Trip Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Emergency, In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .347 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 346 10 424 INDEX Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 298 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 397 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Enhanced Accident Response Feature. . . . . . . . .52, 340 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 80, 298 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 364 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Flashers Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .398 INDEX 425 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 149 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 298 Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 300 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294, 397 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 10 426 INDEX Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Key Removal . . . Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 322 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 .12 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 .12 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 .12 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 .14 INDEX 427 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 392 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 112 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 56, 81, 150 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .153 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .153 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 114, 149 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Wait to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .148 10 428 INDEX Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 399 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Media Hub. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 54 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .153, 347 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . .28, 44, 45, 48, 51 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 374 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Loading Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Locks Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 INDEX 429 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 397, 398 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352, 397 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 305 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .5, 415 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .266 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .135 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 10 430 INDEX Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 208 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 358 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Power Convertible Top Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .206 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 INDEX 431 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .153 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 114 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276, 277 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 150 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 10 432 INDEX Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .206 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 392 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .41 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .211 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . .157, 306 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .265, 266 TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 270, 416 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265, 266 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 270 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 INDEX 433 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .301 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Transaxle Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 375 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .19 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 149 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .205 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 392 Wait to Start Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .148 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 10 434 INDEX Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 414 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 120 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 133 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 210, 211 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 120 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. 2014 FIAT 500 2014 OWNER’S MANUAL FCA US LLC 14FF500-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500